* i386.cc (class Output_data_plt_i386): Add layout_ field.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
729c05fc 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With
1273@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276symbols.
1277
252b5132
RH
1278@cindex cross reference table
1279@kindex --cref
1280@item --cref
1281Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
4818e05f
AM
1291@cindex common allocation
1292@kindex --no-define-common
1293@item --no-define-common
1294This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
252b5132 1309@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1310@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1312Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322@var{expression}.
1323
1324@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1325@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1326@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1327@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx --no-demangle
1329These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1333mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1336demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1338
1339@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1340@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1341@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342@item -I@var{file}
1343@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1344Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347doing.
1348
7ce691ae 1349@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1350@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1351@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1352@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357@item --force-exe-suffix
1358Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367@kindex --gc-sections
1368@kindex --no-gc-sections
1369@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1370@item --gc-sections
1371@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1372Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1373targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1374performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1376
d5465ba2
AM
1377@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
ac69cbc6 1387This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1388@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1389specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
c17d87de
NC
1392@kindex --print-gc-sections
1393@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394@cindex garbage collection
1395@item --print-gc-sections
1396@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402line.
1403
252b5132
RH
1404@cindex help
1405@cindex usage
1406@kindex --help
1407@item --help
1408Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1409
ea20a7da
CC
1410@kindex --target-help
1411@item --target-help
1412Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1413
2509a395
SL
1414@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1416Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1417@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1418
1419@cindex memory usage
1420@kindex --no-keep-memory
1421@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1422@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1423symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1424instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1425necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1426while linking a large executable.
1427
1428@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1430@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1431@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1432Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1433is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1434The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1435behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1436libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1437
aa713662
L
1438@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1439@kindex -z muldefs
1440@item --allow-multiple-definition
1441@itemx -z muldefs
1442Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1443report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1444first definition will be used.
1445
b79e8c78 1446@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1448@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1449@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1450Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1451This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1452determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1453shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1454how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1455
903249d7
NC
1456The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1457referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1458an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1459a shared library.
1460
1461The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1462libraries specified at link time are that:
1463
1464@itemize @bullet
1465@item
1466A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1467that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1468resolvable at load time.
1469@item
1470There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1471symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1472
1473The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1474select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1475architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1476appropriate memset function.
1477@end itemize
b79e8c78 1478
31941635
L
1479@kindex --no-undefined-version
1480@item --no-undefined-version
1481Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1482it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1483will be issued instead.
1484
3e3b46e5
PB
1485@kindex --default-symver
1486@item --default-symver
1487Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1488exported symbols.
1489
1490@kindex --default-imported-symver
1491@item --default-imported-symver
1492Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1493imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1494
252b5132
RH
1495@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1496@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1497Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1498files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1499been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1500This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1501errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1502have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1503inappropriate.
1504
fe7929ce
AM
1505@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1507Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1508library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1509
252b5132
RH
1510@kindex --no-whole-archive
1511@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1512Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1513archive files.
1514
1515@cindex output file after errors
1516@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1517@item --noinhibit-exec
1518Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1519Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1520errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1521when it issues any error whatsoever.
1522
0a9c1c8e
CD
1523@kindex -nostdlib
1524@item -nostdlib
1525Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1526command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1527(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1528
252b5132 1529@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1530@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1532@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1533file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1534@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1535object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1536object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1537should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1538usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1539name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1540list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1541command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1542this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1543@end ifclear
1544
36af4a4e
JJ
1545@kindex -pie
1546@kindex --pic-executable
1547@item -pie
1548@itemx --pic-executable
1549@cindex position independent executables
1550Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1551ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1552libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1553address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1554normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1555defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1556
252b5132
RH
1557@kindex -qmagic
1558@item -qmagic
1559This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1560
1561@kindex -Qy
1562@item -Qy
1563This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1564
1565@kindex --relax
1566@cindex synthesizing linker
1567@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1568@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1569@item --relax
28d5f677 1570@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1571An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1572@ifset GENERIC
1573This option is only supported on a few targets.
1574@end ifset
1575@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1576@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1577@end ifset
1578@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1579@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1580@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1581@ifset XTENSA
1582@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1583@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1584@ifset M68HC11
1585@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1586@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1587@ifset POWERPC
1588@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1589@end ifset
252b5132 1590
28d5f677
NC
1591On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1592global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1593addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1594synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1595instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1596
1597On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1598debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1599@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1600This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1601family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1602@end ifset
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
1605On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1606but ignored.
1607@end ifset
1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1610@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex retaining specified symbols
1613@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1614@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1615@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1617Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1618discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1619symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621(such as VxWorks)
1622@end ifset
1623where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1624run-time memory.
1625
1626@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1627or symbols needed for relocations.
1628
1629You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1630line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1631
1632@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1633@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1634@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1635@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1636Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1637linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1638arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1639them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1640also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1641objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1642@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1643ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1644@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1645
ff5dcc92 1646The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1647SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1648@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1649runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1650options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1651gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1652file systems.
252b5132 1653
ff5dcc92 1654For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1655followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1656the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1657@end ifset
1658
1659@ifset GENERIC
1660@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1661@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1663When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1664happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1665of the input files.
1666
1667When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1668non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1669shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1670explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1671specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1672@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1673either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1674appearing multiple times.
1675
28c309a2
NC
1676This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1677that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1678is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1679runtime linker would do.
1680
252b5132 1681The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1682libraries:
252b5132
RH
1683@enumerate
1684@item
ff5dcc92 1685Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1686@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1687Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1688between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1689specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1690used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1691at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1692by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1693the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1694@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1695On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1696@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1697environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1698@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1699On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1700directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1701@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1702For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1703variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ec4eb78a
L
1705For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1706@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1707libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1708@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1709@item
252b5132
RH
1710The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1711@item
1712For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1713exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1714@end enumerate
1715
1716If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1717warning and continue with the link.
1718@end ifset
1719
1720@kindex -shared
1721@kindex -Bshareable
1722@item -shared
1723@itemx -Bshareable
1724@cindex shared libraries
1725Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1726and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1727shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1728undefined symbols in the link.
1729
252b5132 1730@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1731@item --sort-common
1732@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1733@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1734This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1735ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1736sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1737eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1738between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1739specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1740
2509a395
SL
1741@kindex --sort-section=name
1742@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1743This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1744patterns in the linker script.
1745
2509a395
SL
1746@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1747@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1748This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1749patterns in the linker script.
1750
252b5132 1751@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1752@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1753Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1754each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1755size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1756
1757@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1759Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1760output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1761This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1762certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1763cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1764that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1765support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1766input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1767more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1768many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1769
1770@kindex --stats
1771@item --stats
1772Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1773as execution time and memory usage.
1774
2509a395 1775@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1776@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1777Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1778configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1779that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1780
252b5132
RH
1781@kindex --traditional-format
1782@cindex traditional format
1783@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1784For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1785the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1786use the traditional format instead.
1787
1788@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1789For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1790symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1791full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1792@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1793trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1794combine duplicate entries.
1795
2509a395
SL
1796@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1798Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1799address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1800times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1801line.
1802@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1803for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1804@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1805should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1806sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1807
2509a395
SL
1808@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1810@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1811@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1812@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1814@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1815Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1816@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1817
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1820@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1821When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1822of the first byte of the text segment.
1823
560e09e9
NC
1824@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1825@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1826Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1827values for @samp{method}:
1828
1829@table @samp
1830@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1831Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1832
1833@item report-all
da8bce14 1834Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1835
1836@item ignore-in-object-files
1837Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1838ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1839
1840@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1841Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1842ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1843when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1844libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1845command line.
1846@end table
1847
1848The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1849by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1850
1851Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1852unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1853can change this to a warning.
1854
1715a13c
L
1855@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1856@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1857@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1858@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1859Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1860supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1861the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1862argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1863
1864@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1865@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1866@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1867Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1868used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1869about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1870is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1871see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1872use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1873symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1874@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1875
7ce691ae 1876@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1877@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1878@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1879@item --warn-common
1880Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1881a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1882but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1883you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1884Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1885warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1886
1887There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1888
1889@table @samp
1890@item int i = 1;
1891A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1892file.
1893
1894@item extern int i;
1895An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1896There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1897variable somewhere.
1898
1899@item int i;
1900A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1901variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1902The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1903single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1904size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1905a definition of the same variable.
1906@end table
1907
1908The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1909Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1910just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1911encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1912a common symbol.
1913
1914@enumerate
1915@item
1916Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1917definition for the symbol.
1918@smallexample
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1920 overridden by definition
1921@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1922@end smallexample
1923
1924@item
1925Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1926the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1927except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1928@smallexample
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1930 overriding common
1931@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1932@end smallexample
1933
1934@item
1935Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1936@smallexample
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1938 of `@var{symbol}'
1939@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1940@end smallexample
1941
1942@item
1943Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1944@smallexample
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1946 overridden by larger common
1947@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1948@end smallexample
1949
1950@item
1951Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1952the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1953encountered in a different order.
1954@smallexample
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1956 overriding smaller common
1957@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1958@end smallexample
1959@end enumerate
1960
1961@kindex --warn-constructors
1962@item --warn-constructors
1963Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1964object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1965detect the use of global constructors.
1966
1967@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1968@item --warn-multiple-gp
1969Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1970This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1971Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1972section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1973of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1974base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1975base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1976bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1977large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1978values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1979option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1980
1981@kindex --warn-once
1982@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1983@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1984@item --warn-once
1985Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1986which refers to it.
1987
1988@kindex --warn-section-align
1989@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1990@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1991@item --warn-section-align
1992Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1993alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1994The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1995is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1996the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1997
8fdd7217
NC
1998@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1999@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2000Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2001
a0c402a5
L
2002@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2003@item --warn-alternate-em
2004Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2005
560e09e9
NC
2006@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2008If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2009@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2010This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2011
2012@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2013@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2014This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2015it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2016
252b5132
RH
2017@kindex --whole-archive
2018@cindex including an entire archive
2019@item --whole-archive
2020For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2021@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2022in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2023files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2024library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2025library. This option may be used more than once.
2026
7ec229ce 2027Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2028about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2029Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2030list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2031your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2032
2509a395
SL
2033@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2034@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2035Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2036@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2037undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2038@var{symbol}.
2039
2040This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2041wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2042wishes to call the system function, it should call
2043@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2044
2045Here is a trivial example:
2046
2047@smallexample
2048void *
cc2f008e 2049__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2050@{
cc2f008e 2051 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2052 return __real_malloc (c);
2053@}
2054@end smallexample
2055
ff5dcc92 2056If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2057all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2058instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2059call the real @code{malloc} function.
2060
2061You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2062links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2063you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2064file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2065call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2066
6aa29e7b
JJ
2067@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2068@item --eh-frame-hdr
2069Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2070@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2071
e41b3a13
JJ
2072@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2073@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2074Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2075generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2076if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2077
6c1439be
L
2078@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2079@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2080@item --enable-new-dtags
2081@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2082This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2083systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2084@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2085If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2086created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2087those options are only available for ELF systems.
2088
2d643429 2089@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2090@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2091Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2092close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2093time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2094increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2095value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2096
fdc90cb4
JJ
2097@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2098@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2099Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2100@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2101new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2102the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2103hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2104
35835446
JR
2105@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2106@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2107This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2108linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2109for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2110about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2111
4f9c04f7 2112Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21131021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2114run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2115has been used.
2116
2117The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2118enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2119
c0065db7
RM
2120@kindex --build-id
2121@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2122@item --build-id
2123@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2124Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2125The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2126file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2127@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2128parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2129@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2130@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2131an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2132characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2133omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2134
2135The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2136that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2137unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2138to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2139file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2140string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2141
2142Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2143@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2144@end table
2145
0285c67d
NC
2146@c man end
2147
36f63dca 2148@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2149
0285c67d
NC
2150@c man begin OPTIONS
2151
ff5dcc92 2152The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2153the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2154normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2155use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2156@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2157like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2158symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2159object file).
2160
2161In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2162support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2163PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2164values by either a space or an equals sign.
2165
ff5dcc92 2166@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2167
2168@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2169@item --add-stdcall-alias
2170If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2171as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2172[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --base-file
2175@item --base-file @var{file}
2176Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2177addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2178@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2179[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2180
2181@kindex --dll
2182@item --dll
2183Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2184@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2185file.
bb10df36 2186[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2187
88183869
DK
2188@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2189@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2190@item --enable-long-section-names
2191@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2192The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2193the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2194for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2195fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2196to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2197allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2198disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2199generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2200as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2201with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2202GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2203information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2204option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2205section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2206when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2207image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2208[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2209
252b5132
RH
2210@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2211@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2212@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2213@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2214If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2215do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2216only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2217resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2218undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2219@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2220to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2221warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2222import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2223to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2224feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2225@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2226mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2227[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2228
522f09cd
KT
2229@kindex --leading-underscore
2230@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2231@item --leading-underscore
2232@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2233For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2234in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2235disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2236
252b5132
RH
2237@cindex DLLs, creating
2238@kindex --export-all-symbols
2239@item --export-all-symbols
2240If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2241be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2242otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2243explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2244attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2245option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2246@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2247@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2248exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2249re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2250such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2251@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2252@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2253Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2254not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2255extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2256(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2257These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2258@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2259@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2260@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2261@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2262[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2263
2264@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2265@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2266Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2267exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2268[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2269
2927aaca
NC
2270@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2271@item --exclude-all-symbols
2272Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2274
252b5132
RH
2275@kindex --file-alignment
2276@item --file-alignment
2277Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2278file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2279512.
bb10df36 2280[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2281
2282@cindex heap size
2283@kindex --heap
2284@item --heap @var{reserve}
2285@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2286Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2287to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2288committed.
bb10df36 2289[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2290
2291@cindex image base
2292@kindex --image-base
2293@item --image-base @var{value}
2294Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2295the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2296is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2297your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2298other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2299for dlls.
bb10df36 2300[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2301
2302@kindex --kill-at
2303@item --kill-at
2304If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2305symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2307
26d2d8a2
BF
2308@kindex --large-address-aware
2309@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2310If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2311header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2312greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2313or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2314section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2315[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2316
252b5132
RH
2317@kindex --major-image-version
2318@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2319Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2320[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2321
2322@kindex --major-os-version
2323@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2324Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2325[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2326
2327@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2328@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2329Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2330[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2331
2332@kindex --minor-image-version
2333@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2334Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2335[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2336
2337@kindex --minor-os-version
2338@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2339Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2341
2342@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2343@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2344Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2345[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2346
2347@cindex DEF files, creating
2348@cindex DLLs, creating
2349@kindex --output-def
2350@item --output-def @var{file}
2351The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2352file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2353(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2354library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2355automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2356[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2357
b044cda1
CW
2358@cindex DLLs, creating
2359@kindex --out-implib
2360@item --out-implib @var{file}
2361The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2362import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2363import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2364may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2365makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2366creation step.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2368
2369@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2370@item --enable-auto-image-base
2371Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2372using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2373from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2374collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2375avoided.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2377
2378@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2379@item --disable-auto-image-base
2380Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2381user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2382default.
bb10df36 2383[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2384
2385@cindex DLLs, linking to
2386@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2387@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2388When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2389search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2390@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2391between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2392uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2393@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2394[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2395
2396@kindex --enable-auto-import
2397@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2398Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2399DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2400building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2401'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2402to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2403specification published by Microsoft.
2404
e2a83dd0
NC
2405Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2406data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2407placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2408around a problem with consts that is described here:
2409http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2410
4d8907ac
DS
2411Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2412see this message:
0d888aac 2413
ece2d90e 2414"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2415documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2416
ece2d90e
NC
2417This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2418ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2419allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2420fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2421constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2422multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2423this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2424of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2425the warning, and exit.
2426
2427There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2428data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2429
2fa9fc65
NC
2430One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2431of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2432this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2433
c0065db7
RM
2434A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2435that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2436there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2437a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2438
2439@example
2440extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2441extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2442 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2443@end example
2444
2445or
2446
2447@example
2448extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2449extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2450 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2451@end example
2452
c0065db7 2453For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2454is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2455
2456@example
2457extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2458extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2459 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2460@end example
2461
c406afaf
NC
2462or
2463
2464@example
2465extern long long extern_ll;
2466extern_ll -->
2467 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2468@end example
2469
2fa9fc65 2470A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2471'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2472@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2473requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2474building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2475merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2476between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2477constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2478
2479Original:
2480@example
2481--foo.h
2482extern int arr[];
2483--foo.c
2484#include "foo.h"
2485void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2486 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2487@}
2488@end example
2489
2490Solution 1:
2491@example
2492--foo.h
2493extern int arr[];
2494--foo.c
2495#include "foo.h"
2496void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2497 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2498 volatile int *parr = arr;
2499 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2500@}
2501@end example
2502
2503Solution 2:
2504@example
2505--foo.h
2506/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2507#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2508 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2509#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2510#else
2511#define FOO_IMPORT
2512#endif
2513extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2514--foo.c
2515#include "foo.h"
2516void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2517 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2518@}
2519@end example
2520
c0065db7 2521A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2522library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2523for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2524functions).
bb10df36 2525[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2526
2527@kindex --disable-auto-import
2528@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2529Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2530@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2532
2fa9fc65
NC
2533@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2534@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2536that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2537a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2538environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2540
2541@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2542@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2543Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2544DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2545[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2546
b044cda1
CW
2547@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2548@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2549Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2550[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2551
252b5132
RH
2552@kindex --section-alignment
2553@item --section-alignment
2554Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2555addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2557
2558@cindex stack size
2559@kindex --stack
2560@item --stack @var{reserve}
2561@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2562Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2563to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2564committed.
bb10df36 2565[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2566
2567@kindex --subsystem
2568@item --subsystem @var{which}
2569@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2570@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2571Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2572legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2573@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2574the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2575@var{which}.
bb10df36 2576[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2577
2f563b51
DK
2578The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2579of the PE file header:
2580[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2581
2582@kindex --dynamicbase
2583@item --dynamicbase
2584The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2585randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2586Vista for i386 PE targets.
2587
2588@kindex --forceinteg
2589@item --forceinteg
2590Code integrity checks are enforced.
2591
2592@kindex --nxcompat
2593@item --nxcompat
2594The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2595This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2596
2597@kindex --no-isolation
2598@item --no-isolation
2599Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2600
2601@kindex --no-seh
2602@item --no-seh
2603The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2604this image.
2605
2606@kindex --no-bind
2607@item --no-bind
2608Do not bind this image.
2609
2610@kindex --wdmdriver
2611@item --wdmdriver
2612The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2613
2614@kindex --tsaware
2615@item --tsaware
2616The image is Terminal Server aware.
2617
252b5132
RH
2618@end table
2619
0285c67d
NC
2620@c man end
2621
ac145307
BS
2622@ifset C6X
2623@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2624
2625@c man begin OPTIONS
2626
2627The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2628libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2629all executables use an index of 0.
2630
2631@table @gcctabopt
2632
2633@kindex --dsbt-size
2634@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2635This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2636or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2637entries.
2638
2639@kindex --dsbt-index
2640@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2641This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2642to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2643executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2644@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2645
fbd9ad90
PB
2646@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2647The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2648exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2649
ac145307
BS
2650@end table
2651
2652@c man end
2653@end ifset
2654
93fd0973
SC
2655@ifset M68HC11
2656@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2657
2658@c man begin OPTIONS
2659
2660The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2661memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2662
2663@table @gcctabopt
2664
2665@kindex --no-trampoline
2666@item --no-trampoline
2667This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2668is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2669instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2670
2671@kindex --bank-window
2672@item --bank-window @var{name}
2673This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2674the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2675The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2676paging and addresses within the memory window.
2677
2678@end table
2679
2680@c man end
2681@end ifset
2682
7fb9f789
NC
2683@ifset M68K
2684@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2685
2686@c man begin OPTIONS
2687
2688The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2689when linking for 68K targets.
2690
2691@table @gcctabopt
2692
2693@kindex --got
2694@item --got=@var{type}
2695This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2696@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2697@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2698Info entry for @file{ld}.
2699
2700@end table
2701
2702@c man end
2703@end ifset
2704
252b5132
RH
2705@ifset UsesEnvVars
2706@node Environment
2707@section Environment Variables
2708
0285c67d
NC
2709@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2710
560e09e9 2711You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2712@ifclear SingleFormat
2713@code{GNUTARGET},
2714@end ifclear
2715@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2716
36f63dca 2717@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2718@kindex GNUTARGET
2719@cindex default input format
2720@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2721use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2722of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2723@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2724of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2725attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2726this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2727there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2728object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2729BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2730in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2731@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2732
2733@kindex LDEMULATION
2734@cindex default emulation
2735@cindex emulation, default
2736@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2737@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2738behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2739available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2740the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2741variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2742linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2743
2744@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2745@cindex demangling, default
2746Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2747@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2748default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2749a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2750may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2751options.
2752
0285c67d
NC
2753@c man end
2754@end ifset
2755
252b5132
RH
2756@node Scripts
2757@chapter Linker Scripts
2758
2759@cindex scripts
2760@cindex linker scripts
2761@cindex command files
2762Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2763written in the linker command language.
2764
2765The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2766the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2767the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2768more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2769direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2770described below.
2771
2772The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2773yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2774linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2775to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2776such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2777
2778You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2779line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2780default linker script.
2781
2782You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2783to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2784Linker Scripts}.
2785
2786@menu
2787* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2788* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2789* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2790* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2791* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2792* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2793* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2794* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2795* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2796* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2797* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2798@end menu
2799
2800@node Basic Script Concepts
2801@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2802@cindex linker script concepts
2803We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2804describe the linker script language.
2805
2806The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2807file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2808@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2809The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2810purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2811among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2812section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2813in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2814
2815Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2816also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2817contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2818the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2819A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2820area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2821loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2822which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2823of debugging information.
2824
2825Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2826first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2827the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2828@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2829section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2830same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2831is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2832(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2833based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2834RAM address would be the VMA.
2835
2836You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2837program with the @samp{-h} option.
2838
2839Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2840@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2841has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2842information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2843will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2844static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2845referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2846
2847You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2848program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2849option.
2850
2851@node Script Format
2852@section Linker Script Format
2853@cindex linker script format
2854Linker scripts are text files.
2855
2856You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2857either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2858symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2859generally ignored.
2860
2861Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2862If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2863otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2864double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2865file name.
2866
2867You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2868@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2869to whitespace.
2870
2871@node Simple Example
2872@section Simple Linker Script Example
2873@cindex linker script example
2874@cindex example of linker script
2875Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2876
2877The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2878@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2879memory layout of the output file.
2880
2881The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2882describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2883code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2884@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2885Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2886your input files.
2887
2888For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28890x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2890linker script which will do that:
2891@smallexample
2892SECTIONS
2893@{
2894 . = 0x10000;
2895 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2896 . = 0x8000000;
2897 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2898 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2899@}
2900@end smallexample
2901
2902You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2903followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2904descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2905
252b5132
RH
2906The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2907sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2908counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2909other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2910current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2911incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2912@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2913
2914The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2915required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2916after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2917which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2918wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2919means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2920
2921Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2922@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2923@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2924
2925The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2926the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2927at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2928output section, the value of the location counter will be
2929@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2930effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2931immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2932
2933The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2934alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2935example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2936sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2937may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2938sections.
2939
2940That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2941
2942@node Simple Commands
2943@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2944@cindex linker script simple commands
2945In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2946
2947@menu
2948* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2949* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2950@ifclear SingleFormat
2951* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2952@end ifclear
2953
4a93e180 2954* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2955* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2956@end menu
2957
2958@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2959@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2960@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2961@cindex start of execution
2962@cindex first instruction
2963@cindex entry point
2964The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2965point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2966entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2967@smallexample
2968ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2969@end smallexample
2970
2971There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2972entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2973stopping when one of them succeeds:
2974@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2975@item
252b5132 2976the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2977@item
252b5132 2978the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2979@item
3ab904c4
NC
2980the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2981targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2982check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2983@item
252b5132 2984the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2985@item
252b5132
RH
2986The address @code{0}.
2987@end itemize
2988
2989@node File Commands
36f63dca 2990@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2991@cindex linker script file commands
2992Several linker script commands deal with files.
2993
2994@table @code
2995@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2996@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2997@cindex including a linker script
2998Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2999be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3000with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
300110 levels deep.
3002
4006703d
NS
3003You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3004@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3005
252b5132
RH
3006@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3007@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3008@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3009@cindex input files in linker scripts
3010@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3011@cindex linker script input object files
3012The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3013in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3014
3015For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3016a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3017then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3018
3019In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3020script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3021
e3f2db7f
AO
3022In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3023with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3024located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3025for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3026open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3027linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3028description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3029
ff5dcc92 3030If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3031name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3032@samp{-l}.
3033
3034When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3035files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3036script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3037
3038@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3039@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3040@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3041@cindex grouping input files
3042The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3043files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3044new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3045in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3046
b717d30e
JJ
3047@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3048@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3049@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3050This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3051commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3052as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3053with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3054when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3055@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3056and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3057setting afterwards.
3058
252b5132
RH
3059@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3060@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3061@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3062The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3063@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3064@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3065Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3066precedence.
3067
3068You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3069output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3070
3071@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3072@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3073@cindex library search path in linker script
3074@cindex archive search path in linker script
3075@cindex search path in linker script
3076The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3077@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3078@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3079on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3080are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3081the command line option are searched first.
3082
3083@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3084@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3085@cindex first input file
3086The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3087that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3088though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3089when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3090first file.
3091@end table
3092
3093@ifclear SingleFormat
3094@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3095@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3096A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3097
3098@table @code
3099@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3100@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3101@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3102@cindex output file format in linker script
3103The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3104output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3105exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3106(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3107line option takes precedence.
3108
3109You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3110formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3111This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3112desired endianness.
3113
3114If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3115will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3116output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3117used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3118
3119For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3120command:
3121@smallexample
3122OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3123@end smallexample
3124This says that the default format for the output file is
3125@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3126option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3127format.
3128
3129@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3130@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3131@cindex input file format in linker script
3132The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3133files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3134This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3135(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3136is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3137command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3138@end table
3139@end ifclear
3140
4a93e180
NC
3141@node REGION_ALIAS
3142@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3143@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3144@cindex region alias
3145@cindex region names
3146
3147Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3148@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3149
3150@smallexample
3151REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3152@end smallexample
3153
3154The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3155memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3156to memory regions. An example follows.
3157
3158Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3159memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3160that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3161non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3162access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3163read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3164sections:
3165
3166@itemize @bullet
3167@item
3168@code{.text} program code;
3169@item
3170@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3171@item
3172@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3173@item
3174@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3175@end itemize
3176
3177The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3178part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3179output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3180systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3181@code{C}:
3182@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3183@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3184@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3185@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3186@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3187@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3188@end multitable
3189The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3190loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3191the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3192the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3193
3194The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3195includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3196memory layout:
3197@smallexample
3198INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3199
3200SECTIONS
3201 @{
3202 .text :
3203 @{
3204 *(.text)
3205 @} > REGION_TEXT
3206 .rodata :
3207 @{
3208 *(.rodata)
3209 rodata_end = .;
3210 @} > REGION_RODATA
3211 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3212 @{
3213 data_start = .;
3214 *(.data)
3215 @} > REGION_DATA
3216 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3217 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3218 .bss :
3219 @{
3220 *(.bss)
3221 @} > REGION_BSS
3222 @}
3223@end smallexample
3224
3225Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3226regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3227variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3228@table @code
3229@item A
3230Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3231@smallexample
3232MEMORY
3233 @{
3234 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3235 @}
3236
3237REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3238REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3239REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3240REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3241@end smallexample
3242@item B
3243Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3244into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3245@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3246@smallexample
3247MEMORY
3248 @{
3249 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3250 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3251 @}
3252
3253REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3254REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3255REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3256REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3257@end smallexample
3258@item C
3259Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3260@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3261initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3262system start into the @code{RAM}.
3263@smallexample
3264MEMORY
3265 @{
3266 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3267 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3268 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3269 @}
3270
3271REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3272REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3273REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3274REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3275@end smallexample
3276@end table
3277
3278It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3279@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3280necessary:
3281@smallexample
3282#include <string.h>
3283
3284extern char data_start [];
3285extern char data_size [];
3286extern char data_load_start [];
3287
3288void copy_data(void)
3289@{
3290 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3291 @{
3292 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3293 @}
3294@}
3295@end smallexample
3296
252b5132 3297@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3298@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3299There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3300
3301@table @code
3302@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3303@kindex ASSERT
3304@cindex assertion in linker script
3305Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3306with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3307
3308@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3309@kindex EXTERN
3310@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3311Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3312symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3313modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3314each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3315command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3316
3317@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3318@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3319@cindex common allocation in linker script
3320This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3321to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3322output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3323
4818e05f
AM
3324@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3325@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3326@cindex common allocation in linker script
3327This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3328command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3329to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3330
53d25da6
AM
3331@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3332@kindex INSERT
3333@cindex insert user script into default script
3334This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3335augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3336inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3337@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3338default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3339sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3340linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3341insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3342linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3343default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3344of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3345to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3346is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3347
3348@smallexample
3349SECTIONS
3350@{
3351 OVERLAY :
3352 @{
3353 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3354 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3355 @}
3356@}
3357INSERT AFTER .text;
3358@end smallexample
3359
252b5132
RH
3360@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3361@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3362@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3363This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3364references among certain output sections.
3365
3366In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3367using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3368will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3369errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3370a function defined in the other section.
3371
3372The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3373@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3374an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3375@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3376names.
3377
3378@ifclear SingleFormat
3379@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3380@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3381@cindex machine architecture
3382@cindex architecture
3383Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3384of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3385architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3386the @samp{-f} option.
3387@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3388
3389@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3390@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3391This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3392@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3393in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3394@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3395@end table
3396
3397@node Assignments
3398@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3399@cindex assignment in scripts
3400@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3401@cindex variables, defining
3402You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3403the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3404
3405@menu
3406* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3407* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3408* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3409* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3410@end menu
3411
3412@node Simple Assignments
3413@subsection Simple Assignments
3414
3415You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3416
3417@table @code
3418@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3419@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3420@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3421@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3422@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3423@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3424@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3425@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3426@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3427@end table
3428
3429The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3430@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3431defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3432
3433The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3434may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3435
3436The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3437
3438Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3439
3440You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3441statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3442section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3443
3444The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3445expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3446
3447Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3448assignments may be used:
3449
3450@smallexample
3451floating_point = 0;
3452SECTIONS
3453@{
3454 .text :
3455 @{
3456 *(.text)
3457 _etext = .;
3458 @}
156e34dd 3459 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3460 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3461@}
3462@end smallexample
3463@noindent
3464In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3465zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3466the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3467defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3468upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3469
3470@node PROVIDE
3471@subsection PROVIDE
3472@cindex PROVIDE
3473In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3474only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3475the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3476@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3477@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3478@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3479@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3480@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3481
3482Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3483@smallexample
3484SECTIONS
3485@{
3486 .text :
3487 @{
3488 *(.text)
3489 _etext = .;
3490 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3491 @}
3492@}
3493@end smallexample
3494
3495In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3496underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3497the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3498underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3499If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3500linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3501
7af8e998
L
3502@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3503@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3504@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3505Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3506hidden and won't be exported.
3507
73ae6183
NC
3508@node Source Code Reference
3509@subsection Source Code Reference
3510
3511Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3512intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3513a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3514symbol that does not have a value.
3515
3516Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3517transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3518stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3519prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3520mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3521of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3522variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3523linker script variable might be referred to as:
3524
3525@smallexample
3526 extern int foo;
3527@end smallexample
3528
3529But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3530
3531@smallexample
3532 _foo = 1000;
3533@end smallexample
3534
3535In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3536transformation has taken place.
3537
3538When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3539things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3540in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3541second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3542table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3543contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3544value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3545
3546@smallexample
3547 int foo = 1000;
3548@end smallexample
3549
3550creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3551holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3552number 1000 is initially stored.
3553
3554When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3555first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3556memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3557So:
3558
3559@smallexample
3560 foo = 1;
3561@end smallexample
3562
3563looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3564associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3565address. Whereas:
3566
3567@smallexample
3568 int * a = & foo;
3569@end smallexample
3570
3571looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3572and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3573the variable @samp{a}.
3574
3575Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3576the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3577an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3578
3579@smallexample
3580 foo = 1000;
3581@end smallexample
3582
3583creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3584the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3585address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3586linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3587access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3588
3589Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3590you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3591use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3592section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3593linker script contains these declarations:
3594
3595@smallexample
3596@group
3597 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3598 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3599 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3600@end group
3601@end smallexample
3602
3603Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3604
3605@smallexample
3606@group
3607 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3608
73ae6183
NC
3609 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3610@end group
3611@end smallexample
3612
3613Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3614
252b5132 3615@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3616@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3617@kindex SECTIONS
3618The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3619into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3620
3621The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3622@smallexample
3623SECTIONS
3624@{
3625 @var{sections-command}
3626 @var{sections-command}
3627 @dots{}
3628@}
3629@end smallexample
3630
3631Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3632
3633@itemize @bullet
3634@item
3635an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3636@item
3637a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3638@item
3639an output section description
3640@item
3641an overlay description
3642@end itemize
3643
3644The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3645@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3646those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3647understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3648the layout of the output file.
3649
3650Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3651below.
3652
3653If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3654linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3655section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3656input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3657example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3658in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3659
3660@menu
3661* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3662* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3663* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3664* Input Section:: Input section description
3665* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3666* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3667* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3668* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3669* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3670@end menu
3671
3672@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3673@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3674The full description of an output section looks like this:
3675@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3676@group
7e7d5768 3677@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3678 [AT(@var{lma})]
3679 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3680 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3681 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3682 @{
3683 @var{output-section-command}
3684 @var{output-section-command}
3685 @dots{}
562d3460 3686 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3687@end group
3688@end smallexample
3689
3690Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3691
3692The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3693name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3694The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3695
3696Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3697
3698@itemize @bullet
3699@item
3700a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3701@item
3702an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3703@item
3704data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3705@item
3706a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3707@end itemize
3708
3709@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3710@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3711@cindex name, section
3712@cindex section name
3713The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3714meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3715support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3716must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3717example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3718output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3719names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3720quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3721characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3722commas must be quoted.
3723
3724The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3725Discarding}.
3726
3727@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3728@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3729@cindex address, section
3730@cindex section address
3731The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3732address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3733is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3734
3735If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3736section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3737to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3738alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3739contained within the output section.
3740
3741The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3742
3743@itemize @bullet
3744@item
3745If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3746is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3747in that region.
3748
3749@item
3750If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3751regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3752section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3753be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3754
3755@item
3756If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3757the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3758counter.
3759@end itemize
3760
3761@noindent
3762For example:
3763
252b5132
RH
3764@smallexample
3765.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3766@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3767
252b5132
RH
3768@noindent
3769and
ea5cae92 3770
252b5132
RH
3771@smallexample
3772.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3773@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3774
252b5132
RH
3775@noindent
3776are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3777@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3778counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3779counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3780input sections.
252b5132
RH
3781
3782The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3783For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3784so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3785do something like this:
3786@smallexample
3787.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3788@end smallexample
3789@noindent
3790This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3791aligned upward to the specified value.
3792
3793Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3794location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3795sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3796
3797@node Input Section
36f63dca 3798@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3799@cindex input sections
3800@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3801The most common output section command is an input section description.
3802
3803The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3804You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3805in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3806map the input files into your memory layout.
3807
3808@menu
3809* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3810* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3811* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3812* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3813* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3814@end menu
3815
3816@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3817@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3818@cindex input section basics
3819An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3820by a list of section names in parentheses.
3821
3822The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3823describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3824
3825The most common input section description is to include all input
3826sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3827include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3828@smallexample
3829*(.text)
3830@end smallexample
3831@noindent
18625d54
CM
3832Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3833of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3834match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3835example:
252b5132 3836@smallexample
b4346c09 3837*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3838@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3839will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3840@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3841
3842There are two ways to include more than one section:
3843@smallexample
3844*(.text .rdata)
3845*(.text) *(.rdata)
3846@end smallexample
3847@noindent
3848The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3849@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3850first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3851they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3852@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3853@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3854
3855You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3856You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3857needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3858@smallexample
3859data.o(.data)
3860@end smallexample
3861
ae17ab41
CM
3862To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3863of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3864
3865Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3866
3867@smallexample
3868@group
3869SECTIONS @{
3870 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3871 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3872@}
3873@end group
3874@end smallexample
3875
3876In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3877input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3878@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3879@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3880whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3881
967928e9
AM
3882You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3883matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3884with no whitespace around the colon.
3885
3886@table @samp
3887@item archive:file
3888matches file within archive
3889@item archive:
3890matches the whole archive
3891@item :file
3892matches file but not one in an archive
3893@end table
3894
3895Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3896wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3897single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3898@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3899within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3900also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3901other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3902from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3903command.
3904
252b5132
RH
3905If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3906the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3907commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3908@smallexample
3909data.o
3910@end smallexample
3911
967928e9
AM
3912When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3913and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3914characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3915name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3916did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3917though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3918@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3919the archive search path.
3920
3921@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3922@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3923@cindex input section wildcards
3924@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3925@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3926@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3927In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3928name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3929
3930The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3931pattern for the file name.
3932
3933The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3934
3935@table @samp
3936@item *
3937matches any number of characters
3938@item ?
3939matches any single character
3940@item [@var{chars}]
3941matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3942character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3943@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3944@item \
3945quotes the following character
3946@end table
3947
3948When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3949will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3950Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3951exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3952@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3953a @samp{/} character.
3954
3955File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3956specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3957does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3958
3959If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3960appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3961will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3962sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3963@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3964@smallexample
3965.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3966.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3967@end smallexample
3968
bcaa7b3e 3969@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3970Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3971in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3972this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3973pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3974@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3975into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3976
bcaa7b3e
L
3977@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3978@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3979difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3980ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3981
02ecc8e9
L
3982@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3983@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3984difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3985ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3986encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3987
bcaa7b3e
L
3988@cindex SORT
3989@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3990
3991When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3992can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3993
3994@enumerate
3995@item
3996@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3997It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3998sections have the same name.
3999@item
4000@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4001It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4002sections have the same alignment.
4003@item
c0065db7 4004@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4005treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4006@item
4007@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4008is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4009@item
4010All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4011@end enumerate
4012
4013When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4014section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4015takes precedence over the command line option.
4016
4017If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4018command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4019treated as nested sorting command.
4020
4021@enumerate
4022@item
4023@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4024@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4025@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4026@item
4027@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4028@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4029@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4030@end enumerate
4031
4032If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4033command line option will be ignored.
4034
252b5132
RH
4035If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4036@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4037precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4038
4039This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4040files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4041sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4042The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4043with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4044linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4045@smallexample
4046@group
4047SECTIONS @{
4048 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4049 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4050 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4051 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4052@}
4053@end group
4054@end smallexample
4055
4056@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4057@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4058@cindex common symbol placement
4059@cindex uninitialized data placement
4060A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4061file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4062linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4063named @samp{COMMON}.
4064
4065You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4066other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4067particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4068input files are placed in another section.
4069
4070In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4071@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4072@smallexample
4073.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4074@end smallexample
4075
4076@cindex scommon section
4077@cindex small common symbols
4078Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4079example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4080symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4081different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4082the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4083symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4084to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4085locations.
4086
4087@cindex [COMMON]
4088You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4089notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4090@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4091
4092@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4093@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4094@cindex KEEP
4095@cindex garbage collection
4096When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4097it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4098This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4099with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4100@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4101
4102@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4103@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4104The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4105to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4106start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4107@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4108follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4109@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4110@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4111All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4112files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4113
4114@smallexample
4115@group
4116SECTIONS @{
4117 outputa 0x10000 :
4118 @{
4119 all.o
4120 foo.o (.input1)
4121 @}
36f63dca
NC
4122@end group
4123@group
252b5132
RH
4124 outputb :
4125 @{
4126 foo.o (.input2)
4127 foo1.o (.input1)
4128 @}
36f63dca
NC
4129@end group
4130@group
252b5132
RH
4131 outputc :
4132 @{
4133 *(.input1)
4134 *(.input2)
4135 @}
4136@}
4137@end group
a1ab1d2a 4138@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4139
4140@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4141@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4142@cindex data
4143@cindex section data
4144@cindex output section data
4145@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4146@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4147@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4148@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4149@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4150You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4151@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4152an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4153parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4154value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4155counter.
4156
4157The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4158store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4159bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4160stored.
4161
4162For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4163of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4164@smallexample
4165BYTE(1)
4166LONG(addr)
4167@end smallexample
4168
4169When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4170same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4171target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4172@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4173@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4174
4175If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4176which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4177When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4178true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4179endianness of the first input object file.
4180
36f63dca 4181Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4182between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4183@smallexample
4184SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4185@end smallexample
4186whereas this will work:
4187@smallexample
4188SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4189@end smallexample
4190
252b5132
RH
4191@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4192@cindex holes, filling
4193@cindex unspecified memory
4194You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4195current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4196otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4197gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4198with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4199necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4200point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4201than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4202different parts of an output section.
4203
4204This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4205value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4206@smallexample
563e308f 4207FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4208@end smallexample
4209
4210The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4211section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4212part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4213entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4214precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4215expression.
252b5132
RH
4216
4217@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4218@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4219There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4220commands.
4221
4222@table @code
4223@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4224@cindex input filename symbols
4225@cindex filename symbols
4226@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4227The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4228The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4229file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4230the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4231
4232This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4233normally used for any other object file format.
4234
4235@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4236@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4237@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4238@item CONSTRUCTORS
4239When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4240unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4241destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4242arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4243automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4244For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4245linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4246@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4247ignored for other object file formats.
4248
4249The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4250constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4251Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4252the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4253first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4254of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4255compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4256formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4257@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4258the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4259destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4260@code{exit}.
4261
4262For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4263arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4264addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4265and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4266linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4267runtime code expects to see.
4268
4269@smallexample
4270 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4271 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4272 *(.ctors)
4273 LONG(0)
4274 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4275 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4276 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4277 *(.dtors)
4278 LONG(0)
4279 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4280@end smallexample
4281
4282If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4283which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4284are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4285are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4286command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4287@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4288@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4289@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4290
4291Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4292and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4293need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4294scripts.
4295
4296@end table
4297
4298@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4299@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4300@cindex discarding sections
4301@cindex sections, discarding
4302@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4303The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4304for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4305be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4306@smallexample
49c13adb 4307.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4308@end smallexample
4309@noindent
4310will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4311@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4312sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4313space in an output section will also create the output section.
4314
a0976ea4 4315The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4316on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4317symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4318the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4319section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4320
4321@cindex /DISCARD/
4322The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4323input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4324section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4325
4326@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4327@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4328@cindex output section attributes
4329We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4330like this:
0c71d759 4331
252b5132 4332@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4333@group
7e7d5768 4334@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4335 [AT(@var{lma})]
4336 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4337 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4338 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4339 @{
4340 @var{output-section-command}
4341 @var{output-section-command}
4342 @dots{}
562d3460 4343 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4344@end group
4345@end smallexample
0c71d759 4346
252b5132
RH
4347We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4348@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4349remaining section attributes.
4350
a1ab1d2a 4351@menu
252b5132
RH
4352* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4353* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4354* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4355* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4356* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4357* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4358* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4359* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4360@end menu
4361
4362@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4363@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4364Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4365parentheses. The following types are defined:
4366
4367@table @code
4368@item NOLOAD
4369The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4370loaded into memory when the program is run.
4371@item DSECT
4372@itemx COPY
4373@itemx INFO
4374@itemx OVERLAY
4375These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4376rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4377marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4378section when the program is run.
4379@end table
4380
4381@kindex NOLOAD
4382@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4383@cindex loading, preventing
4384The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4385the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4386the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4387@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4388need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4389@smallexample
4390@group
4391SECTIONS @{
4392 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4393 @dots{}
4394@}
4395@end group
4396@end smallexample
4397
4398@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4399@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4400@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4401@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4402@cindex load address
4403@cindex section load address
4404Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4405@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4406@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4407specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4408address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4409
ea5cae92
NC
4410The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4411specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4412takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4413load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4414region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4415
4416If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4417section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4418load address:
4419
4420@itemize @bullet
4421@item
4422If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4423the LMA address as well.
4424
4425@item
4426If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4427
4428@item
4429Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4430with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4431section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4432VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4433the last section in the located region.
4434
4435@item
4436If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4437that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4438
4439@item
4440If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4441section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4442@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4443
4444@cindex ROM initialized data
4445@cindex initialized data in ROM
4446This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4447example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4448called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4449@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4450even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4451uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4452defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4453counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4454
4455@smallexample
4456@group
4457SECTIONS
4458 @{
4459 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4460 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4461 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4462 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4463 .bss 0x3000 :
4464 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4465@}
4466@end group
4467@end smallexample
4468
4469The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4470this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4471the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4472how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4473script.
4474
4475@smallexample
4476@group
4477extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4478char *src = &_etext;
4479char *dst = &_data;
4480
ea5cae92
NC
4481/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4482while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4483 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4484
ea5cae92 4485/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4486for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4487 *dst = 0;
4488@end group
4489@end smallexample
4490
bbf115d3
L
4491@node Forced Output Alignment
4492@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4493@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4494@cindex forcing output section alignment
4495@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4496You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4497
7e7d5768
AM
4498@node Forced Input Alignment
4499@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4500@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4501@cindex forcing input section alignment
4502@cindex input section alignment
4503You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4504SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4505sections, whether larger or smaller.
4506
0c71d759
NC
4507@node Output Section Constraint
4508@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4509@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4510@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4511@cindex constraints on output sections
4512You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4513of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4514read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4515@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4516
252b5132 4517@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4518@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4519@kindex >@var{region}
4520@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4521@cindex memory regions and sections
4522You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4523using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4524
4525Here is a simple example:
4526@smallexample
4527@group
4528MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4529SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4530@end group
4531@end smallexample
4532
4533@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4534@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4535@kindex :@var{phdr}
4536@cindex section, assigning to program header
4537@cindex program headers and sections
4538You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4539using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4540one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4541assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4542@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4543linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4544
4545Here is a simple example:
4546@smallexample
4547@group
4548PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4549SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4550@end group
4551@end smallexample
4552
4553@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4554@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4555@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4556@cindex section fill pattern
4557@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4558You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4559@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4560(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4561within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4562alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4563necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4564of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4565an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4566fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4567other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4568pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4569expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4570
4571You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4572output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4573
4574Here is a simple example:
4575@smallexample
4576@group
563e308f 4577SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4578@end group
4579@end smallexample
4580
4581@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4582@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4583@kindex OVERLAY
4584@cindex overlays
4585An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4586are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4587the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4588copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4589required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4590can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4591than another.
4592
4593Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4594@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4595output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4596command is as follows:
4597@smallexample
4598@group
4599OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4600 @{
4601 @var{secname1}
4602 @{
4603 @var{output-section-command}
4604 @var{output-section-command}
4605 @dots{}
4606 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4607 @var{secname2}
4608 @{
4609 @var{output-section-command}
4610 @var{output-section-command}
4611 @dots{}
4612 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4613 @dots{}
4614 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4615@end group
4616@end smallexample
4617
4618Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4619section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4620section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4621those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4622except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4623sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4624
4625The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4626addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4627memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4628whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4629and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4630and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4631
4632If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4633among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4634all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4635section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4636NOCROSSREFS}.
4637
4638For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4639provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4640defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4641@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4642the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4643within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4644symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4645
4646At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4647the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4648
4649Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4650@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4651@smallexample
4652@group
4653 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4654 @{
4655 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4656 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4657 @}
4658@end group
4659@end smallexample
4660@noindent
4661This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4662address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4663@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4664following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4665@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4666@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4667
4668C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4669like the following.
4670
4671@smallexample
4672@group
4673 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4674 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4675 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4676@end group
4677@end smallexample
4678
4679Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4680everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4681example could have been written identically as follows.
4682
4683@smallexample
4684@group
4685 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4686 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4687 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4688 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4689 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4690 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4691 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4692@end group
4693@end smallexample
4694
4695@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4696@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4697@kindex MEMORY
4698@cindex memory regions
4699@cindex regions of memory
4700@cindex allocating memory
4701@cindex discontinuous memory
4702The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4703memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4704
4705The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4706memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4707may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4708can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4709set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4710regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4711around to fit into the available regions.
4712
4713A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4714command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4715you wish. The syntax is:
4716@smallexample
4717@group
a1ab1d2a 4718MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4719 @{
4720 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4721 @dots{}
4722 @}
4723@end group
4724@end smallexample
4725
4726The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4727region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4728Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4729with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4730must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4731add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4732command.
252b5132
RH
4733
4734@cindex memory region attributes
4735The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4736whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4737not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4738@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4739section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4740the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4741them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4742
4743The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4744@table @samp
4745@item R
4746Read-only section
4747@item W
4748Read/write section
4749@item X
4750Executable section
4751@item A
4752Allocatable section
4753@item I
4754Initialized section
4755@item L
4756Same as @samp{I}
4757@item !
c09e9a8c 4758Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4759@end table
4760
4761If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4762@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4763attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4764in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4765attributes.
4766
4767@kindex ORIGIN =
4768@kindex o =
4769@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4770The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4771the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4772cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4773abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4774@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4775
4776@kindex LENGTH =
4777@kindex len =
4778@kindex l =
4779The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4780region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4781be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4782@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4783
4784In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4785available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4786and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4787linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4788is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4789or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4790explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4791region.
4792
4793@smallexample
4794@group
a1ab1d2a 4795MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4796 @{
4797 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4798 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4799 @}
4800@end group
4801@end smallexample
4802
4803Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4804specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4805@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4806a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4807output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4808was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4809the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4810output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4811region, the linker will issue an error message.
4812
3ec57632 4813It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4814expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4815@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4816
4817@smallexample
4818@group
c0065db7 4819 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4820@end group
4821@end smallexample
4822
252b5132
RH
4823@node PHDRS
4824@section PHDRS Command
4825@kindex PHDRS
4826@cindex program headers
4827@cindex ELF program headers
4828@cindex program segments
4829@cindex segments, ELF
4830The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4831@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4832loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4833program with the @samp{-p} option.
4834
4835When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4836reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4837program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4838This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4839interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4840
4841The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4842in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4843precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4844the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4845not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4846
4847The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4848generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4849ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4850
4851This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4852@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4853
4854@smallexample
4855@group
4856PHDRS
4857@{
4858 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4859 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4860@}
4861@end group
4862@end smallexample
4863
4864The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4865of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4866header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4867with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4868must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4869is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4870
4871Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4872system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4873specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4874sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4875attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4876Section Phdr}.
4877
4878It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4879merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4880repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4881contain the section.
4882
4883If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4884then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4885not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4886convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4887placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4888default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4889segment at all.
4890
4891@kindex FILEHDR
4892@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4893You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4894the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4895The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4896file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4897include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4898segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4899these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4900
4901The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4902value of the keyword.
4903
4904@table @asis
4905@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4906Indicates an unused program header.
4907
4908@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4909Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4910the file.
4911
4912@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4913Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4914
4915@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4916Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4917found.
4918
4919@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4920Indicates a segment holding note information.
4921
4922@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4923A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4924ABI.
4925
4926@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4927Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4928
4929@item @var{expression}
4930An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4931be used for types not defined above.
4932@end table
4933
4934You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4935in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4936@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4937Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4938output section attribute.
4939
4940The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4941which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4942explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4943an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4944header.
4945
4946Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4947headers used on a native ELF system.
4948
4949@example
4950@group
4951PHDRS
4952@{
4953 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4954 interp PT_INTERP ;
4955 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4956 data PT_LOAD ;
4957 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4958@}
4959
4960SECTIONS
4961@{
4962 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4963 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4964 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4965 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4966 @dots{}
4967 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4968 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4969 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4970 @dots{}
4971@}
4972@end group
4973@end example
4974
4975@node VERSION
4976@section VERSION Command
4977@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4978@cindex symbol versions
4979@cindex version script
4980@cindex versions of symbols
4981The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4982only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4983symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4984a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4985shared library.
4986
4987You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4988you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4989also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4990
4991The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4992@smallexample
4993VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4994@end smallexample
4995
4996The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4997Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4998version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4999version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5000version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5001scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5002library.
5003
5004The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5005examples.
5006
5007@smallexample
5008VERS_1.1 @{
5009 global:
5010 foo1;
5011 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5012 old*;
5013 original*;
5014 new*;
252b5132
RH
5015@};
5016
5017VERS_1.2 @{
5018 foo2;
5019@} VERS_1.1;
5020
5021VERS_2.0 @{
5022 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5023 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5024 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5025 "f(int, double)";
5026 @};
252b5132
RH
5027@} VERS_1.2;
5028@end smallexample
5029
5030This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5031version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5032The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5033a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5034of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5035symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5036is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5037in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5038However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5039name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5040
5041Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5042depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5043to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5044
5045Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5046depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5047and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5048
5049When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5050specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5051unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5052unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5053somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5054wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5055wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5056set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5057ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5058
5059The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5060they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5061could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5062However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5063
0f6bf451 5064Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5065in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5066symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5067won't.
5068
5069@smallexample
7c9c73be 5070@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5071@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5072
252b5132
RH
5073When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5074symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5075requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5076shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5077loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5078linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5079application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5080way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5081all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5082search for each symbol reference.
5083
5084The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5085doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5086that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5087functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5088the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5089required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5090that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5091versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5092the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5093
5094There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5095first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5096source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5097script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5098maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5099@smallexample
5100__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5101@end smallexample
5102@noindent
5103in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5104be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5105The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5106@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5107takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5108
5109The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5110function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5111an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5112version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5113linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5114
5115To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5116source file. Here is an example:
5117
5118@smallexample
5119__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5120__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5121__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5122__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5123@end smallexample
5124
5125In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5126unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5127example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5128@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5129
5130When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5131some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5132this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5133@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5134declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5135you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5136
5137If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5138within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5139(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5140specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5141
cb840a31
L
5142You can also specify the language in the version script:
5143
5144@smallexample
5145VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5146@end smallexample
5147
c0065db7 5148The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5149The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5150demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5151patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5152@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5153
86043bbb
MM
5154Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5155described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5156or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5157the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5158whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5159cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5160might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5161should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5162expect when you upgrade.
5163
252b5132
RH
5164@node Expressions
5165@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5166@cindex expressions
5167@cindex arithmetic
5168The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5169that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5170expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5171host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5172
5173You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5174
5175The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5176expressions.
5177
5178@menu
5179* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5180* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5181* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5182* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5183* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5184* Operators:: Operators
5185* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5186* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5187* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5188@end menu
5189
5190@node Constants
5191@subsection Constants
5192@cindex integer notation
5193@cindex constants in linker scripts
5194All constants are integers.
5195
5196As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5197octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5198hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5199@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5200@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5201value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5202
5203@cindex scaled integers
5204@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5205@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5206@cindex suffixes for integers
5207@cindex integer suffixes
5208In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5209constant by
5210@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5211@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5212@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5213@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5214@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5215@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5216@tex
5217${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5218@end tex
5219@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5220respectively. For example, the following
5221all refer to the same quantity:
5222
252b5132 5223@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5224_fourk_1 = 4K;
5225_fourk_2 = 4096;
5226_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5227_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5228@end smallexample
5229
8a308ae8
NC
5230Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5231conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5232
0c71d759
NC
5233@node Symbolic Constants
5234@subsection Symbolic Constants
5235@cindex symbolic constants
5236@kindex CONSTANT
5237It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5238the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5239
5240@table @code
5241@item MAXPAGESIZE
5242@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5243The target's maximum page size.
5244
5245@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5246@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5247The target's default page size.
5248@end table
5249
5250So for example:
5251
5252@smallexample
5253 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5254@end smallexample
5255
5256will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5257supported by the target.
5258
252b5132
RH
5259@node Symbols
5260@subsection Symbol Names
5261@cindex symbol names
5262@cindex names
5263@cindex quoted symbol names
5264@kindex "
5265Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5266and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5267Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5268specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5269keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5270@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5271"SECTION" = 9;
5272"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5273@end smallexample
5274
5275Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5276to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5277whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5278
ecca9871
L
5279@node Orphan Sections
5280@subsection Orphan Sections
5281@cindex orphan
5282Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5283are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5284script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5285output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5286placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5287attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5288same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5289If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5290at the end of the file.
5291
5292For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5293well as section flag.
5294
41911f68 5295If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5296the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5297__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5298section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5299orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5300representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5301character.
5302
252b5132
RH
5303@node Location Counter
5304@subsection The Location Counter
5305@kindex .
5306@cindex dot
5307@cindex location counter
5308@cindex current output location
5309The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5310current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5311location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5312within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5313anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5314
5315@cindex holes
5316Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5317moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5318location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5319and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5320doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5321
5322@smallexample
5323SECTIONS
5324@{
5325 output :
5326 @{
5327 file1(.text)
5328 . = . + 1000;
5329 file2(.text)
5330 . += 1000;
5331 file3(.text)
563e308f 5332 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5333@}
5334@end smallexample
5335@noindent
5336In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5337located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5338followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5339@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5340@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5341specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5342
5c6bbab8
NC
5343@cindex dot inside sections
5344Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5345current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5346statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5347absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5348however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5349not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5350
5351@smallexample
5352SECTIONS
5353@{
5354 . = 0x100
5355 .text: @{
5356 *(.text)
5357 . = 0x200
5358 @}
5359 . = 0x500
5360 .data: @{
5361 *(.data)
5362 . += 0x600
5363 @}
5364@}
5365@end smallexample
5366
5367The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5368and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5369the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5370much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5371move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5372and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5373the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5374the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5375
b5666f2f
AM
5376@cindex dot outside sections
5377Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5378output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5379needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5380
5381@smallexample
5382SECTIONS
5383@{
5384 start_of_text = . ;
5385 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5386 end_of_text = . ;
5387
5388 start_of_data = . ;
5389 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5390 end_of_data = . ;
5391@}
5392@end smallexample
5393
5394If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5395not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5396between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5397should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5398blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5399the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5400sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5401statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5402special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5403place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5404as follows:
5405
5406@smallexample
5407SECTIONS
5408@{
5409 start_of_text = . ;
5410 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5411 end_of_text = . ;
5412
5413 start_of_data = . ;
5414 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5415 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5416 end_of_data = . ;
5417@}
5418@end smallexample
5419
5420This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5421@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5422placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5423assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5424a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5425section. So you could write:
5426
5427@smallexample
5428SECTIONS
5429@{
5430 start_of_text = . ;
5431 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5432 end_of_text = . ;
5433
5434 . = . ;
5435 start_of_data = . ;
5436 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5437 end_of_data = . ;
5438@}
5439@end smallexample
5440
5441Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5442@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5443
252b5132
RH
5444@need 2000
5445@node Operators
5446@subsection Operators
5447@cindex operators for arithmetic
5448@cindex arithmetic operators
5449@cindex precedence in expressions
5450The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5451the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5452@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5453@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5454@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5455@smallexample
5456precedence associativity Operators Notes
5457(highest)
54581 left ! - ~ (1)
54592 left * / %
54603 left + -
54614 left >> <<
54625 left == != > < <= >=
54636 left &
54647 left |
54658 left &&
54669 left ||
546710 right ? :
546811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5469(lowest)
5470@end smallexample
5471Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5472(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5473(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5474@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5475@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5476@tex
5477\vskip \baselineskip
5478%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5479\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5480\hrule
5481\halign
5482{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5483height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5484&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5485height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5486\noalign{\hrule}
5487height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5488&highest&&&&&\cr
5489% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5490&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5491&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5492&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5493&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5494&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5495&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5496&7&&left&&|&\cr
5497&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5498&9&&left&&||&\cr
5499&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5500&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5501&lowest&&&&&\cr
5502height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5503\hrule}
5504@end tex
5505@iftex
5506{
5507@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5508@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5509@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5510}
5511@end iftex
5512@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5513
5514@node Evaluation
5515@subsection Evaluation
5516@cindex lazy evaluation
5517@cindex expression evaluation order
5518The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5519an expression when absolutely necessary.
5520
5521The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5522address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5523regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5524as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5525
5526However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5527until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5528other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5529for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5530
5531The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5532assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5533allocation.
5534
5535Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5536@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5537
5538If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5539available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5540following
5541@smallexample
5542@group
5543SECTIONS
5544 @{
a1ab1d2a 5545 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5546 @{ *(.text) @}
5547 @}
5548@end group
5549@end smallexample
5550@noindent
5551will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5552address}.
5553
5554@node Expression Section
5555@subsection The Section of an Expression
5556@cindex expression sections
5557@cindex absolute expressions
5558@cindex relative expressions
5559@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5560@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5561@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5562Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5563relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5564using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5565value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5566symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5567operations.
5568
abf4be64
AM
5569Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5570section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5571address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5572@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5573functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5574One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5575(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5576differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5577versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5578section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5579Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5580absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5581given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5582everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5583
5584In the following simple example,
252b5132 5585
7542af2a
AM
5586@smallexample
5587@group
5588SECTIONS
5589 @{
5590 . = 0x100;
5591 __executable_start = 0x100;
5592 .data :
5593 @{
5594 . = 0x10;
5595 __data_start = 0x10;
5596 *(.data)
5597 @}
5598 @dots{}
5599 @}
5600@end group
5601@end smallexample
252b5132 5602
7542af2a
AM
5603both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5604address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5605@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5606section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5607
5c3049d2
AM
5608For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5609addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5610
5611@itemize @bullet
5612@item
5613Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5614relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5615and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5616@item
5617Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5618or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5619same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5620address before applying the operator.
5621@end itemize
5622
5623The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5624
5625@itemize @bullet
5626@item
5627An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5628@item
5629The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5630@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5631The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5632relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5633(after above conversions) is also a number.
5634@item
5635The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5636relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5637section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5638@item
5639The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5640conversions) is an absolute address.
5641@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5642
5643You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5644to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5645create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5646section @samp{.data}:
5647@smallexample
5648SECTIONS
5649 @{
5650 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5651 @}
5652@end smallexample
5653@noindent
5654If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5655@samp{.data} section.
5656
7542af2a
AM
5657Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5658particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5659
252b5132
RH
5660@node Builtin Functions
5661@subsection Builtin Functions
5662@cindex functions in expressions
5663The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5664use in linker script expressions.
5665
5666@table @code
5667@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5668@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5669@cindex expression, absolute
5670Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5671of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5672value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5673normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5674
5675@item ADDR(@var{section})
5676@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5677@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5678Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5679script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5680the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5681@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5682@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5683the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5684@smallexample
5685@group
5686SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5687 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5688 @{
252b5132
RH
5689 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5690 @dots{}
5691 @}
5692 .output :
5693 @{
5694 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5695 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5696 @}
5697@dots{} @}
5698@end group
5699@end smallexample
5700
876f4090
NS
5701@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5702@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5703@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5704@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5705@cindex round up location counter
5706@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5707@cindex round up expression
5708@cindex align expression
5709Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5710to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5711doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5712arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5713expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5714equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5715
5716Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5717next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5718variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5719input sections:
252b5132
RH
5720@smallexample
5721@group
5722SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5723 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5724 *(.data)
5725 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5726 @}
5727@dots{} @}
5728@end group
5729@end smallexample
5730@noindent
5731The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5732a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5733a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5734of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5735
5736The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5737
362c1d1a
NS
5738@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5739@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5740@cindex section alignment
5741Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5742been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5743evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5744the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5745value in that section.
5746@smallexample
5747@group
5748SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5749 .output @{
5750 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5751 @dots{}
5752 @}
5753@dots{} @}
5754@end group
5755@end smallexample
5756
252b5132
RH
5757@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5758@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5759This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5760scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5761section.
5762
2d20f7bf
JJ
5763@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5764@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5765This is equivalent to either
5766@smallexample
5767(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5768@end smallexample
5769or
5770@smallexample
5771(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5772@end smallexample
5773@noindent
5774depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5775for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5776@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5777If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5778memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5779bytes in the on-disk file.
5780
5781This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5782any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5783@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5784be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5785working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5786
5787@noindent
5788Example:
5789@smallexample
5790 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5791@end smallexample
5792
5793@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5794@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5795This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5796evaluation purposes.
5797
5798@smallexample
5799 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5800@end smallexample
5801
a4f5ad88
JJ
5802@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5803@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5804This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5805@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5806When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5807does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5808@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5809boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5810it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5811@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5812
5813@smallexample
5814 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5815@end smallexample
5816
252b5132
RH
5817@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5818@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5819@cindex symbol defaults
5820Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5821defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5822return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5823default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5824shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5825the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5826existed, its value is preserved:
5827
5828@smallexample
5829@group
5830SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5831 .text : @{
5832 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5833 @dots{}
5834 @}
5835 @dots{}
5836@}
5837@end group
5838@end smallexample
5839
3ec57632
NC
5840@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5841@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5842Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5843
252b5132
RH
5844@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5845@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5846@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5847Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5848Section LMA}).
5849
5850@kindex MAX
5851@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5852Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5853
5854@kindex MIN
5855@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5856Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5857
5858@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5859@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5860@cindex unallocated address, next
5861Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5862This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5863use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5864output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5865
3ec57632
NC
5866@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5867@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5868Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5869
ba916c8a
MM
5870@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5871@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5872Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5873value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5874option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5875@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5876be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5877``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5878name.
5879
252b5132
RH
5880@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5881@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5882@cindex section size
5883Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5884been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5885evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5886@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5887@smallexample
5888@group
5889SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5890 .output @{
5891 .start = . ;
5892 @dots{}
5893 .end = . ;
5894 @}
5895 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5896 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5897@dots{} @}
5898@end group
5899@end smallexample
5900
5901@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5902@itemx sizeof_headers
5903@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5904@cindex header size
5905Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5906information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5907this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5908choose, to facilitate paging.
5909
5910@cindex not enough room for program headers
5911@cindex program headers, not enough room
5912When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5913@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5914number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5915addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5916additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5917room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5918the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5919script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5920you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5921command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5922@end table
5923
5924@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5925@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5926@cindex implicit linker scripts
5927If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5928an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5929linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5930linker will report an error.
5931
5932An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5933
5934Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5935assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5936commands.
5937
5938Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5939at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5940read. This can affect archive searching.
5941
5942@ifset GENERIC
5943@node Machine Dependent
5944@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5945
5946@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5947@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5948sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5949functionality are not listed.
5950
5951@menu
36f63dca
NC
5952@ifset H8300
5953* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5954@end ifset
5955@ifset I960
5956* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5957@end ifset
5958@ifset ARM
5959* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5960@end ifset
5961@ifset HPPA
5962* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5963@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5964@ifset M68K
5965* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5966@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5967@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5968* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5969@end ifset
2469cfa2 5970@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5971* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5972@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5973@ifset M68HC11
5974* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5975@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5976@ifset POWERPC
5977* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5978@end ifset
5979@ifset POWERPC64
5980* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5981@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5982@ifset SPU
5983* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5984@end ifset
74459f0e 5985@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5986* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5987@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5988@ifset WIN32
5989* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5990@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5991@ifset XTENSA
5992* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5993@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5994@end menu
5995@end ifset
5996
252b5132
RH
5997@ifset H8300
5998@ifclear GENERIC
5999@raisesections
6000@end ifclear
6001
6002@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6003@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6004
6005@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6006For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6007you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6008
6009@table @emph
6010@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6011@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6012@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6013targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6014program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6015respectively.
6016
6017@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6018@item synthesizing instructions
6019@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6020@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6021sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6022page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6023(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6024@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6025top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6026
6027@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6028@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6029biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6030which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6031page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6032(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6033@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6034the top page of memory).
6035
6036@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6037@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
603832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6039changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6040(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6041@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6042the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6043@end table
6044
6045@ifclear GENERIC
6046@lowersections
6047@end ifclear
6048@end ifset
6049
36f63dca 6050@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6051@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6052@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6053@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6054@node Renesas
6055@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6056
c2dcd04e
NC
6057@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6058H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6059options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6060@end ifset
6061@end ifclear
6062
6063@ifset I960
6064@ifclear GENERIC
6065@raisesections
6066@end ifclear
6067
6068@node i960
6069@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6070
6071@cindex i960 support
6072
6073You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6074specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6075family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6076incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6077linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6078libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6079search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6080
6081For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6082well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6083paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6084the names
6085
6086@smallexample
6087@group
6088try
6089libtry.a
6090tryca
6091libtryca.a
6092@end group
6093@end smallexample
6094
6095@noindent
6096The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6097two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6098
6099You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6100the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6101use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6102specifies a library.
6103
6104@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6105@cindex relaxing on i960
6106@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6107you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6108@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6109them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6110instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6111instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6112target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6113not itself call any subroutines).
6114
48229727
JB
6115@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6116@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6117@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6118The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6119
6120The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6121
85fdf906
AH
6122@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6123@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6124The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6125
36f63dca
NC
6126@ifclear GENERIC
6127@lowersections
6128@end ifclear
6129@end ifset
6130
6131@ifset ARM
6132@ifclear GENERIC
6133@raisesections
6134@end ifclear
6135
93fd0973
SC
6136@ifset M68HC11
6137@ifclear GENERIC
6138@raisesections
6139@end ifclear
6140
6141@node M68HC11/68HC12
6142@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6143
6144@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6145
6146@subsection Linker Relaxation
6147
6148For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6149optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6150
6151@table @emph
6152@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6153@item relaxing address modes
6154@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6155targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6156program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6157respectively.
6158
6159@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6160transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6161page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6162
6163@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6164When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6165of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6166addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6167@code{bset} instructions.
6168
6169@end table
6170
6171@subsection Trampoline Generation
6172
6173@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6174@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6175For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6176call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6177will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6178trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6179case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6180point to the function trampoline.
6181
6182@ifclear GENERIC
6183@lowersections
6184@end ifclear
6185@end ifset
6186
36f63dca 6187@node ARM
3674e28a 6188@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6189
6190@cindex ARM interworking support
6191@kindex --support-old-code
6192For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6193between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6194been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6195line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6196libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6197option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6198given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6199which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6200the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6201non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6202
6203@cindex thumb entry point
6204@cindex entry point, thumb
6205@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6206The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6207@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6208But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6209branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6210executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6211
ce11ba6c
KT
6212@cindex PE import table prefixing
6213@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6214The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6215the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6216elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6217import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6218
e489d0ae
PB
6219@cindex BE8
6220@kindex --be8
6221The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6222executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6223The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6224
3674e28a
PB
6225@cindex TARGET1
6226@kindex --target1-rel
6227@kindex --target1-abs
6228The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6229@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6230or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6231and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6232
6233@cindex TARGET2
6234@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6235The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6236@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6237meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6238@table @samp
6239@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6240@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6241@item abs
6242@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6243@item got-rel
6244@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6245@end table
6246
319850b4
JB
6247@cindex FIX_V4BX
6248@kindex --fix-v4bx
6249The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6250specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6251interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6252also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6253
6254In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6255linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6256@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6257
6258In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6259relocations are ignored.
6260
845b51d6
PB
6261@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6262@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6263Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6264relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6265
6266@smallexample
6267TST rM, #1
6268MOVEQ PC, rM
6269BX Rn
6270@end smallexample
6271
6272This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6273and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6274condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6275
33bfe774
JB
6276@cindex USE_BLX
6277@kindex --use-blx
6278The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6279BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6280situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6281code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6282each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6283
6284This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6285specify it if you are using that target.
6286
c6dd86c6
JB
6287@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6288@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6289The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6290bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6291instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6292to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6293the support code can read the intended values.
6294
6295The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6296intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6297and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6298intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6299full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6300you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6301
6302If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6303enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6304@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6305mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6306vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6307@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6308
6309If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6310potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6311such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6312first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6313instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6314the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6315are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6316
bf21ed78
MS
6317@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6318@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6319The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6320warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6321enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6322linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6323using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6324not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6325
6326@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6327@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6328The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6329warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6330@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6331linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6332using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6333
726150b7
NC
6334@cindex PIC_VENEER
6335@kindex --pic-veneer
6336The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6337ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6338is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6339@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6340
6341@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6342@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6343The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6344code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6345perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6346placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6347controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6348The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6349duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6350group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6351code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6352where they should be placed.
6353
6354The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6355@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6356placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6357branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6358placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6359value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6360exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6361A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6362linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6363from the input sections.
6364
6365The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6366@samp{N = +1}.
6367
1a51c1a4
NC
6368Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6369only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6370otherwise.
6371
36f63dca
NC
6372@ifclear GENERIC
6373@lowersections
6374@end ifclear
6375@end ifset
6376
6377@ifset HPPA
6378@ifclear GENERIC
6379@raisesections
6380@end ifclear
6381
6382@node HPPA ELF32
6383@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6384@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6385@kindex --multi-subspace
6386When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6387import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6388The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6389stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6390multiple sub-spaces.
6391
6392@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6393@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6394Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6395stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6396@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6397sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6398a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6399the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6400conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6401prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6402A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6403branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6404@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6405@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6406detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6407positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6408
6409Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6410single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6411create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6412large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6413
6414@ifclear GENERIC
6415@lowersections
6416@end ifclear
6417@end ifset
6418
7fb9f789
NC
6419@ifset M68K
6420@ifclear GENERIC
6421@raisesections
6422@end ifclear
6423
6424@node M68K
6425@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6426
6427@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6428@kindex --got=@var{type}
6429The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6430The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6431@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6432the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6433@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6434entries only at non-negative offsets.
6435@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6436entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6437support such GOTs.
6438@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6439output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6440file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6441files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6442
6443@ifclear GENERIC
6444@lowersections
6445@end ifclear
6446@end ifset
6447
36f63dca
NC
6448@ifset MMIX
6449@ifclear GENERIC
6450@raisesections
6451@end ifclear
6452
6453@node MMIX
6454@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6455For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6456@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6457understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6458can translate between the two formats.
6459
6460There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6461Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6462registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6463equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6464@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6465global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6466this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6467symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6468
7a2de473
HPN
6469Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6470@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6471The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6472of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6473
6474Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6475are left out from an mmo file.
6476
6477@ifclear GENERIC
6478@lowersections
6479@end ifclear
6480@end ifset
6481
6482@ifset MSP430
6483@ifclear GENERIC
6484@raisesections
6485@end ifclear
6486
6487@node MSP430
6488@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6489For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6490will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6491just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6492
6493@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6494The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6495
6496@table @code
6497@item @samp{.vectors}
6498Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6499
6500@item @samp{.bootloader}
6501Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6502in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6503
6504@item @samp{.infomem}
6505Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6506this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6507
c0065db7 6508@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6509This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6510in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6511
6512@item @samp{.noinit}
6513Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6514
c0065db7 6515The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6516@end table
6517
6518@ifclear GENERIC
6519@lowersections
6520@end ifclear
6521@end ifset
6522
2a60a7a8
AM
6523@ifset POWERPC
6524@ifclear GENERIC
6525@raisesections
6526@end ifclear
6527
6528@node PowerPC ELF32
6529@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6530@cindex PowerPC long branches
6531@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6532Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6533displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6534@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6535@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6536the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6537section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6538section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6539@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6540both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6541considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6542
6543@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6544@table @option
6545@cindex PowerPC PLT
6546@kindex --bss-plt
6547@item --bss-plt
6548Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6549generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6550the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6551writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6552@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6553PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6554compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6555BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6556
016687f8
AM
6557@kindex --secure-plt
6558@item --secure-plt
6559@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6560@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6561when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6562layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6563style BSS PLT.
6564
2a60a7a8
AM
6565@cindex PowerPC GOT
6566@kindex --sdata-got
6567@item --sdata-got
6568The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6569sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6570@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6571section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6572@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6573@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6574@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6575@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6576PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6577pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6578GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6579really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6580
6581@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6582@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6583@item --emit-stub-syms
6584This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6585symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6586
6587@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6588@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6589@item --no-tls-optimize
6590PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6591sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6592disable the optimization.
6593@end table
6594
6595@ifclear GENERIC
6596@lowersections
6597@end ifclear
6598@end ifset
6599
6600@ifset POWERPC64
6601@ifclear GENERIC
6602@raisesections
6603@end ifclear
6604
6605@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6606@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6607
6608@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6609@table @option
6610@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6611@kindex --stub-group-size
6612@item --stub-group-size
6613Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6614by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6615@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6616sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6617a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6618the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6619conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6620prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6621A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6622branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6623@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6624@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6625detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6626positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6627
6628Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6629single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6630create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6631large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6632
6633@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6634@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6635@item --emit-stub-syms
6636This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6637symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6638
6639@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6640@kindex --dotsyms
6641@kindex --no-dotsyms
6642@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6643These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6644in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6645function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6646code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6647properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6648to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6649@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6650dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6651feature.
6652
6653@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6654@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6655@item --no-tls-optimize
6656PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6657sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6658disable the optimization.
6659
6660@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6661@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6662@item --no-opd-optimize
6663PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6664corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6665the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6666Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6667
6668@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6669@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6670@item --non-overlapping-opd
6671Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6672@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6673the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6674entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6675
6676@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6677@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6678@item --no-toc-optimize
6679PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6680entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6681reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6682marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6683marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6684relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6685unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6686reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6687discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6688reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6689code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6690optimization.
6691
6692@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6693@kindex --no-multi-toc
6694@item --no-multi-toc
6695By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6696entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6697total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6698grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6699TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6700calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6701help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
670264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6703Use this option to turn off this feature.
6704@end table
6705
6706@ifclear GENERIC
6707@lowersections
6708@end ifclear
6709@end ifset
6710
49fa1e15
AM
6711@ifset SPU
6712@ifclear GENERIC
6713@raisesections
6714@end ifclear
6715
6716@node SPU ELF
6717@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6718
6719@cindex SPU ELF options
6720@table @option
6721
6722@cindex SPU plugins
6723@kindex --plugin
6724@item --plugin
6725This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6726
6727@cindex SPU overlays
6728@kindex --no-overlays
6729@item --no-overlays
6730Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6731regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6732@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6733turns off all this special overlay handling.
6734
6735@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6736@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6737@item --emit-stub-syms
6738This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6739symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6740
6741@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6742@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6743@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6744This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6745function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6746on calls to non-overlay regions.
6747
6748@cindex SPU local store size
6749@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6750@item --local-store=lo:hi
6751@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6752the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6753range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6754
c0065db7 6755@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6756@kindex --stack-analysis
6757@item --stack-analysis
6758SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6759unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6760under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6761@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6762@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6763determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6764for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6765for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6766for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6767find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6768and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6769under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6770dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6771is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6772and calls will be given.
6773
c0065db7 6774@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6775@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6776@item --emit-stack-syms
6777This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6778in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6779These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6780functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6781functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6782such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6783The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6784@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6785@end table
6786
6787@ifclear GENERIC
6788@lowersections
6789@end ifclear
6790@end ifset
6791
36f63dca
NC
6792@ifset TICOFF
6793@ifclear GENERIC
6794@raisesections
6795@end ifclear
6796
6797@node TI COFF
6798@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6799@cindex TI COFF versions
6800@kindex --format=@var{version}
6801The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6802TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6803also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6804format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6805header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6806
6807@ifclear GENERIC
6808@lowersections
6809@end ifclear
6810@end ifset
6811
2ca22b03
NC
6812@ifset WIN32
6813@ifclear GENERIC
6814@raisesections
6815@end ifclear
6816
6817@node WIN32
6818@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6819
c0065db7 6820This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6821See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6822command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6823
6824@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6825@cindex import libraries
6826@item import libraries
69da35b5 6827The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6828libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6829regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6830archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6831support for creating such libraries provided with the
6832@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6833
c0065db7
RM
6834@item exporting DLL symbols
6835@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6836The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6837
6838@table @emph
6839@item using auto-export functionality
6840@cindex using auto-export functionality
6841By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6842which is controlled by the following command line options:
6843
0a5d968e
NC
6844@itemize
6845@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6846@item --exclude-symbols
6847@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6848@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6849@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6850@end itemize
6851
09e2aba4
DK
6852When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6853(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6854symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6855often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6856private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6857options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6858exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6859final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6860
6861If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6862command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6863if either of the following are true:
6864
6865@itemize
6866@item A DEF file is used.
6867@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6868@end itemize
dc8465bf 6869
c0065db7
RM
6870@item using a DEF file
6871@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6872Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6873an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6874exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6875name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6876command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6877
6878@example
6879gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6880@end example
6881
0a5d968e
NC
6882Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6883@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6884
dc8465bf
NC
6885Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6886
6887@example
4b5bd4e7 6888LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6889
6890EXPORTS
6891foo
6892bar
6893_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6894another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6895var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6896doo = foo == foo2
6897eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6898@end example
dc8465bf 6899
7fcab871 6900This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6901symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6902alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6903by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6904@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6905@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6906export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6907in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6908symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6909
6b31ad16
DS
6910The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6911name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6912the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6913
b45619c0
NC
6914When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6915library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6916@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6917executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6918
6919With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6920specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6921non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6922
6923If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6924or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6925filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6926
4b5bd4e7
DS
6927The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6928
6929@example
6930EXPORTS
6931 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6932 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6933 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6934@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6935
6936Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6937@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6938@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6939@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6940Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6941@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6942string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6943
6944The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6945
6946@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6947will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6948by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6949linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6950library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6951
6952@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6953The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6954the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6955@code{*_imp__foo}).
6956
6957@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6958well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6959read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6960variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6961the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6962extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6963application will behave unexpectedly.
6964
6965@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6966it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6967symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6968API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6969the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6970
4b5bd4e7
DS
6971See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6972other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6973
6974@cindex creating a DEF file
6975While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6976with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6977
6978@item Using decorations
6979@cindex Using decorations
6980Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6981itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6982declared as:
6983
6984@example
6985__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6986__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6987@end example
6988
6989All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6990any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6991this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6992the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6993
6994Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6995decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6996instead:
6997
6998@example
6999__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7000__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7001@end example
7002
c0065db7
RM
7003This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7004when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7005variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7006code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7007of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7008omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7009@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7010information.
c0065db7 7011@end table
dc8465bf 7012
2ca22b03
NC
7013@cindex automatic data imports
7014@item automatic data imports
7015The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7016by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7017compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7018issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7019code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7020c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7021initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7022decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7023platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7024command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7025The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7026suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7027trigger the feature's use.
7028
c0065db7 7029auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7030additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7031
c0065db7 7032"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7033documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7034
c0065db7
RM
7035The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7036occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7037One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7038below.
7039
7040@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7041For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7042object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7043offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7044field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7045in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7046without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7047The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7048references.
7049
c0065db7
RM
7050The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7051be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7052themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7053runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7054compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7055support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7056run without error on an older system.
7057
c0065db7
RM
7058@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7059enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7060
7061@cindex direct linking to a dll
7062@item direct linking to a dll
7063The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7064including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7065libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7066traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7067libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7068function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7069though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7070storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7071tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7072large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7073
c0065db7 7074Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7075@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7076of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7077perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7078select the dll instead of an import library.
7079
2ca22b03 7080
69da35b5
NC
7081For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7082to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7083
7084@example
45e948fe
NC
7085libxxx.dll.a
7086xxx.dll.a
7087libxxx.a
7088xxx.lib
69da35b5 7089cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7090libxxx.dll
7091xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7092@end example
7093
69da35b5
NC
7094before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7095
c0065db7
RM
7096(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7097where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7098@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7099file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7100@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7101
c0065db7
RM
7102Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7103@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7104was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7105various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7106could coexist on the same machine.
7107
2ca22b03
NC
7108The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7109applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7110libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7111
7112@example
7113bin/
7114 cygxxx.dll
7115lib/
7116 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7117 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7118@end example
7119
c0065db7
RM
7120Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7121done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7122
71231. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7124@example
7125gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7126@end example
2ca22b03 7127
69da35b5
NC
7128However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7129(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7130@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7131not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7132
2ca22b03
NC
71332. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7134directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7135should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7136making the app/dll.
7137
7138@example
7139ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7140@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7141
7142Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7143
7144@example
7145gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7146@end example
69da35b5
NC
7147
7148This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7149perfectly legal
7150
7151@example
7152bin/
7153 cygxxx-5.dll
7154lib/
c0065db7 7155 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7156@end example
7157
dc8465bf 7158Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7159even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7160@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7161
7162Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7163wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7164
71651. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7166work with auto-imported data.
7167
dc8465bf
NC
71682. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7169import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7170symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7171for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7172possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7173
45e948fe
NC
71743. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7175critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7176in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7177stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7178
69da35b5 7179So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7180true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7181a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7182binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7183massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7184requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7185will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7186
c0065db7 7187@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7188@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7189@item adding additional names
7190Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7191A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7192exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7193when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7194import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7195
c0065db7 7196@example
dc8465bf
NC
7197LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7198
7199EXPORTS
c0065db7 7200foo
dc8465bf 7201_foo = foo
c0065db7 7202@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7203
7204The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7205
7206Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7207source code using the "weak" attribute:
7208
c0065db7
RM
7209@example
7210void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7211void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7212@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7213
7214See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7215symbols.
7216
7217@item renaming symbols
7218Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7219kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7220@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7221DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7222created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7223
c0065db7 7224@example
dc8465bf
NC
7225LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7226
7227EXPORTS
7228_foo = foo
c0065db7 7229@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7230
7231The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7232@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7233@end table
dc8465bf 7234
0a5d968e 7235Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7236unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7237If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7238@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7239that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7240@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7241renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7242to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7243the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7244In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7245which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7246
7247@cindex weak externals
7248@item weak externals
7249The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7250weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7251defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7252are three variants of weak externals:
7253@itemize
7254@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7255called lazy externals.
7256@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7257This form is not presently implemented.
7258@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7259implemented.
7260@end itemize
7261As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7262are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7263uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7264
7265@cindex aligned common symbols
7266@item aligned common symbols
7267As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7268desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7269the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7270carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7271by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7272tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7273but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7274warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7275@end table
7276
7277@ifclear GENERIC
7278@lowersections
7279@end ifclear
7280@end ifset
7281
e0001a05
NC
7282@ifset XTENSA
7283@ifclear GENERIC
7284@raisesections
7285@end ifclear
7286
7287@node Xtensa
7288@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7289
7290@cindex Xtensa processors
7291The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7292@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7293specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7294keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7295example, with the command:
7296
7297@smallexample
7298SECTIONS
7299@{
7300 .text : @{
7301 *(.literal .text)
7302 @}
7303@}
7304@end smallexample
7305
7306@noindent
7307@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7308and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7309literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7310interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7311group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7312files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7313and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7314
43cd72b9 7315@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7316@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7317Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7318provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7319is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7320literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7321will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7322location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7323the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7324unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7325@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7326range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7327
7328For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7329to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7330instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7331instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7332instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7333@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7334hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7335By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7336switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7337density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7338instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7339performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7340linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7341a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7342
7343The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7344control the linker:
7345
7346@cindex Xtensa options
7347@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7348@item --size-opt
7349When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7350more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7351no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7352alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7353preserve the correctness of the code.
7354@end table
e0001a05
NC
7355
7356@ifclear GENERIC
7357@lowersections
7358@end ifclear
7359@end ifset
7360
252b5132
RH
7361@ifclear SingleFormat
7362@node BFD
7363@chapter BFD
7364
7365@cindex back end
7366@cindex object file management
7367@cindex object formats available
7368@kindex objdump -i
7369The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7370These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7371object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7372format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7373it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7374associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7375object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7376(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7377list all the formats available for your configuration.
7378
7379@cindex BFD requirements
7380@cindex requirements for BFD
7381As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7382several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7383BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7384formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7385been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7386BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7387may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7388
7389One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7390mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7391useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7392conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7393
7394@menu
7395* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7396@end menu
7397
7398@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7399@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7400@cindex opening object files
7401@include bfdsumm.texi
7402@end ifclear
7403
7404@node Reporting Bugs
7405@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7406@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7407@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7408
ff5dcc92 7409Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7410
7411Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7412it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7413to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7414work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7415@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7416
7417In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7418information that enables us to fix the bug.
7419
7420@menu
7421* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7422* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7423@end menu
7424
7425@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7426@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7427@cindex bug criteria
7428
7429If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7430
7431@itemize @bullet
7432@cindex fatal signal
7433@cindex linker crash
7434@cindex crash of linker
7435@item
7436If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7437@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7438
7439@cindex error on valid input
7440@item
ff5dcc92 7441If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7442
7443@cindex invalid input
7444@item
ff5dcc92 7445If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7446may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7447object files are correct.
7448
7449@item
7450If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7451improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7452@end itemize
7453
7454@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7455@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7456@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7457@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7458
7459A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7460products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7461recommend you contact that organization first.
7462
7463You can find contact information for many support companies and
7464individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7465distribution.
7466
ad22bfe8 7467@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7468Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7469@value{BUGURL}.
7470@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7471
7472The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7473@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7474fact or leave it out, state it!
7475
7476Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7477problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7478assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7479matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7480the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7481location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7482were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7483into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7484specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7485and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7486
7487Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7488the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7489on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7490
7491Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7492bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7493respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7494You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7495
7496To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7497
7498@itemize @bullet
7499@item
ff5dcc92 7500The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7501the @samp{--version} argument.
7502
7503Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7504the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7505
7506@item
ff5dcc92 7507Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7508patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7509
7510@item
7511The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7512version number.
7513
7514@item
ff5dcc92 7515What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7516``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7517
7518@item
7519The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7520observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7521list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7522sufficient.
7523
7524If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7525and then we might not encounter the bug.
7526
7527@item
7528A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7529bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7530provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7531bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7532state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7533requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7534we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7535attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7536
7537If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7538@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7539object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7540@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7541how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7542
7543@item
7544A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7545incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7546
ff5dcc92 7547Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7548will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7549not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7550a chance to make a mistake.
7551
7552Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7553say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7554copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7555C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7556and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7557fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7558you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7559any conclusion from our observations.
7560
7561@item
ff5dcc92 7562If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7563diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7564@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7565If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7566context, not by line number.
7567
7568The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7569sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7570@end itemize
7571
7572Here are some things that are not necessary:
7573
7574@itemize @bullet
7575@item
7576A description of the envelope of the bug.
7577
7578Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7579which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7580changes will not affect it.
7581
7582This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7583will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7584with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7585We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7586
7587Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7588of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7589output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7590less time, and so on.
7591
7592However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7593report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7594
7595@item
7596A patch for the bug.
7597
7598A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7599the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7600a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7601to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7602
ff5dcc92 7603Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7604construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7605through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7606able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7607fixed.
7608
7609And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7610patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7611help us to understand.
7612
7613@item
7614A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7615
7616Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7617things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7618@end itemize
7619
7620@node MRI
7621@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7622@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7623To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7624linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7625alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7626described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7627simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7628@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7629linker commands; these commands are described here.
7630
7631In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7632file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7633features to make use of them.
7634
7635You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7636@samp{-c} command-line option.
7637
7638Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7639command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7640blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7641MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7642issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7643
7644Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7645
7646You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7647lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7648The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7649
7650@table @code
7651@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7652@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7653@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7654Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7655the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7656@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7657your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7658script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7659commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7660input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7661@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7662
7663@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7664@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7665Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7666in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7667
7668@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7669
7670@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7671@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7672Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7673@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7674
7675@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7676@item BASE @var{expression}
7677Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7678absolute addresses) in the output file.
7679
7680@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7681@item CHIP @var{expression}
7682@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7683This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7684
7685@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7686@item END
7687This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7688
7689@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7690@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7691Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7692language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7693
7694@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7695@item
252b5132
RH
7696S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7697
7698@item
7699IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7700
7701@item
7702COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7703@samp{COFF}
7704@end enumerate
7705
7706@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7707@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7708Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7709@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7710
7711The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7712same line, with no change in its effect.
7713
7714@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7715@item LOAD @var{filename}
7716@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7717Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7718same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7719command line.
7720
7721@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7722@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7723@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7724MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7725option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7726
7727@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7728@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7729@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7730Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7731order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7732script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7733sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7734file, in the order specified.
7735
7736@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7737@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7738@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7739@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7740Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7741@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7742
7743@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7744@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7745@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7746@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7747You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7748specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7749If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7750@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7751@end table
7752
793c5807
NC
7753@node GNU Free Documentation License
7754@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7755@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7756
370b66a1
CD
7757@node LD Index
7758@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7759
7760@printindex cp
7761
7762@tex
7763% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7764% meantime:
7765\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7766\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7767\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7768\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7769\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7770\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7771\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7772\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7773\page\colophon
7774% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7775@end tex
7776
252b5132 7777@bye
This page took 1.056947 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.